include/elf
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set I960
28 @set M68HC11
29 @set M68K
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @format
44 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 @end format
48 @end ifinfo
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
96 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @ifset I960
368 @cindex architectures
369 @kindex -A @var{arch}
370 @item -A @var{architecture}
371 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
373 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
375 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
377 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
378 family}, for details.
379
380 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
381 other architecture families.
382 @end ifset
383
384 @ifclear SingleFormat
385 @cindex binary input format
386 @kindex -b @var{format}
387 @kindex --format=@var{format}
388 @cindex input format
389 @cindex input format
390 @item -b @var{input-format}
391 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
392 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
394 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
395 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
396 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
397 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
398 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402 @xref{BFD}.
403
404 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406 linking object files of different formats), by including
407 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
408 particular format.
409
410 The default format is taken from the environment variable
411 @code{GNUTARGET}.
412 @ifset UsesEnvVars
413 @xref{Environment}.
414 @end ifset
415 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
416 @code{TARGET};
417 @ifclear man
418 see @ref{Format Commands}.
419 @end ifclear
420 @end ifclear
421
422 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424 @cindex compatibility, MRI
425 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
427 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
428 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
429 @ifclear man
430 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @ifset man
433 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434 @end ifset
435 Introduce MRI script files with
436 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
437 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
439 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441 @cindex common allocation
442 @kindex -d
443 @kindex -dc
444 @kindex -dp
445 @item -d
446 @itemx -dc
447 @itemx -dp
448 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454 @cindex entry point, from command line
455 @kindex -e @var{entry}
456 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
457 @item -e @var{entry}
458 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
467 @kindex --exclude-libs
468 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
470 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
471 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476 be treated as hidden.
477
478 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489 regardless of this option.
490
491 @cindex dynamic symbol table
492 @kindex -E
493 @kindex --export-dynamic
494 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
495 @item -E
496 @itemx --export-dynamic
497 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
498 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
499 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
500 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
501 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
502
503 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
504 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
505 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
506 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
507
508 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
509 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
510 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
511 linking the program itself.
512
513 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
514 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
515 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
516
517 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
518 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
519 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
520
521 @ifclear SingleFormat
522 @cindex big-endian objects
523 @cindex endianness
524 @kindex -EB
525 @item -EB
526 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
527
528 @cindex little-endian objects
529 @kindex -EL
530 @item -EL
531 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
532 @end ifclear
533
534 @kindex -f @var{name}
535 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
536 @item -f @var{name}
537 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
538 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
539 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
540 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
541 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
542
543 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
544 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
545 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
546 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
547 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
548 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
549 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
550 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
551 machine specific performance.
552
553 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
554 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
555
556 @kindex -F @var{name}
557 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
558 @item -F @var{name}
559 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
560 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
561 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
562 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
563 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
567 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
568 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
569 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
570 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
571 @var{name}.
572
573 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
574 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
575 object files.
576 @ifclear SingleFormat
577 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
578 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
579 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
580 environment variable.
581 @end ifclear
582 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
583 creating an ELF shared object.
584
585 @cindex finalization function
586 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
587 @item -fini=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
589 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
590 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
591 the function to call.
592
593 @kindex -g
594 @item -g
595 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
596
597 @kindex -G @var{value}
598 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
599 @cindex object size
600 @item -G @var{value}
601 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
602 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
603 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
604 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
605 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
606
607 @cindex runtime library name
608 @kindex -h @var{name}
609 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
610 @item -h @var{name}
611 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
613 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
614 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
615 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
616 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
617
618 @kindex -i
619 @cindex incremental link
620 @item -i
621 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
622
623 @cindex initialization function
624 @kindex -init=@var{name}
625 @item -init=@var{name}
626 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
627 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
628 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
629 function to call.
630
631 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
632 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
633 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
634 @item -l @var{namespec}
635 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
636 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
637 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
638 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
639 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
640 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
641
642 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
643 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
644 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
645 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
646 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
647 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
648 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
649 @var{filename}.
650
651 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
652 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
653 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
654 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
655 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
656 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
657
658 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
659 archives multiple times.
660
661 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
662
663 @ifset GENERIC
664 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
665 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
666 behaviour of the AIX linker.
667 @end ifset
668
669 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
670 @kindex -L @var{dir}
671 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
672 @item -L @var{searchdir}
673 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
674 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
675 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
676 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
677 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
678 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
679 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
680 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
681 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
682 option is specified.
683
684 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
685 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
686
687 @ifset UsesEnvVars
688 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
689 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
690 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
691 @end ifset
692
693 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
694 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
695 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
696
697 @cindex emulation
698 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
699 @item -m @var{emulation}
700 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
701 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
702
703 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
704 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
705
706 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
707 configured.
708
709 @cindex link map
710 @kindex -M
711 @kindex --print-map
712 @item -M
713 @itemx --print-map
714 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
715 information about the link, including the following:
716
717 @itemize @bullet
718 @item
719 Where object files are mapped into memory.
720 @item
721 How common symbols are allocated.
722 @item
723 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
724 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
725 @item
726 The values assigned to symbols.
727
728 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
729 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
730 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
731 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
732 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
733 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
734 linker script containing:
735
736 @smallexample
737 foo = 1
738 foo = foo * 4
739 foo = foo + 8
740 @end smallexample
741
742 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
743 option is used:
744
745 @smallexample
746 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
747 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
748 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
749 @end smallexample
750
751 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
752 scripts.
753 @end itemize
754
755 @kindex -n
756 @cindex read-only text
757 @cindex NMAGIC
758 @kindex --nmagic
759 @item -n
760 @itemx --nmagic
761 Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
762 @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
763
764 @kindex -N
765 @kindex --omagic
766 @cindex read/write from cmd line
767 @cindex OMAGIC
768 @item -N
769 @itemx --omagic
770 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
771 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
772 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
773 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
774 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
775 specification published by Microsoft.
776
777 @kindex --no-omagic
778 @cindex OMAGIC
779 @item --no-omagic
780 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
781 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
782 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
783 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
784
785 @kindex -o @var{output}
786 @kindex --output=@var{output}
787 @cindex naming the output file
788 @item -o @var{output}
789 @itemx --output=@var{output}
790 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
791 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
792 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
793
794 @kindex -O @var{level}
795 @cindex generating optimized output
796 @item -O @var{level}
797 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
798 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
799 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
800 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
801 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
802 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
803 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
804
805 @kindex -q
806 @kindex --emit-relocs
807 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
808 @item -q
809 @itemx --emit-relocs
810 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
811 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
812 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
813 in larger executables.
814
815 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
816
817 @kindex --force-dynamic
818 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
819 @item --force-dynamic
820 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
821 to VxWorks targets.
822
823 @cindex partial link
824 @cindex relocatable output
825 @kindex -r
826 @kindex --relocatable
827 @item -r
828 @itemx --relocatable
829 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
830 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
831 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
832 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
833 @code{OMAGIC}.
834 @c ; see @option{-N}.
835 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
836 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
837 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
838
839 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
840 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
841 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
842 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
843 with input files in other formats at all.
844
845 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
846
847 @kindex -R @var{file}
848 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
849 @cindex symbol-only input
850 @item -R @var{filename}
851 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
852 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
853 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
854 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
855 programs. You may use this option more than once.
856
857 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
858 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
859 the @option{-rpath} option.
860
861 @kindex -s
862 @kindex --strip-all
863 @cindex strip all symbols
864 @item -s
865 @itemx --strip-all
866 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
867
868 @kindex -S
869 @kindex --strip-debug
870 @cindex strip debugger symbols
871 @item -S
872 @itemx --strip-debug
873 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
874
875 @kindex -t
876 @kindex --trace
877 @cindex input files, displaying
878 @item -t
879 @itemx --trace
880 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
881
882 @kindex -T @var{script}
883 @kindex --script=@var{script}
884 @cindex script files
885 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
886 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
887 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
888 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
889 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
890 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
891 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
892 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
893 options accumulate.
894
895 @kindex -dT @var{script}
896 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
897 @cindex script files
898 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
899 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
900 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
901
902 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
903 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
904 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
905 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
906 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
907 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
908 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
909 @samp{gcc}).
910
911 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
912 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
913 @cindex undefined symbol
914 @item -u @var{symbol}
915 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
916 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
917 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
918 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
919 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
920 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
921
922 @kindex -Ur
923 @cindex constructors
924 @item -Ur
925 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
926 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
927 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
928 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
929 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
930 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
931 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
932 @samp{-r} for the others.
933
934 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
935 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
936 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
937 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
938 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
939 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
940 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
941 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
942 in a linker script.
943
944 @kindex -v
945 @kindex -V
946 @kindex --version
947 @cindex version
948 @item -v
949 @itemx --version
950 @itemx -V
951 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
952 lists the supported emulations.
953
954 @kindex -x
955 @kindex --discard-all
956 @cindex deleting local symbols
957 @item -x
958 @itemx --discard-all
959 Delete all local symbols.
960
961 @kindex -X
962 @kindex --discard-locals
963 @cindex local symbols, deleting
964 @item -X
965 @itemx --discard-locals
966 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
967 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
968 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
969
970 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
971 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
972 @cindex symbol tracing
973 @item -y @var{symbol}
974 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
975 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
976 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
977 to prepend an underscore.
978
979 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
980 don't know where the reference is coming from.
981
982 @kindex -Y @var{path}
983 @item -Y @var{path}
984 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
985 for Solaris compatibility.
986
987 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
988 @item -z @var{keyword}
989 The recognized keywords are:
990 @table @samp
991
992 @item combreloc
993 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
994 lookup caching possible.
995
996 @item defs
997 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
998 shared libraries are still allowed.
999
1000 @item execstack
1001 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1002
1003 @item initfirst
1004 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1005 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1006 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1007 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1008 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1009 objects.
1010
1011 @item interpose
1012 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1013 but the primary executable.
1014
1015 @item lazy
1016 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1017 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1018 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1019 Lazy binding is the default.
1020
1021 @item loadfltr
1022 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1023 runtime.
1024
1025 @item muldefs
1026 Allows multiple definitions.
1027
1028 @item nocombreloc
1029 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1030
1031 @item nocopyreloc
1032 Disables production of copy relocs.
1033
1034 @item nodefaultlib
1035 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1036 ignore any default library search paths.
1037
1038 @item nodelete
1039 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1040
1041 @item nodlopen
1042 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1043
1044 @item nodump
1045 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1046
1047 @item noexecstack
1048 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1049
1050 @item norelro
1051 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1052
1053 @item now
1054 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1055 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1056 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1057 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1058 first called.
1059
1060 @item origin
1061 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1062
1063 @item relro
1064 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1065
1066 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1067 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1068
1069 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1070 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1071
1072 @end table
1073
1074 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1075
1076 @kindex -(
1077 @cindex groups of archives
1078 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1079 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1080 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1081 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1082
1083 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1084 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1085 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1086 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1087 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1088 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1089 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1090 resolved.
1091
1092 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1093 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1094 more archives.
1095
1096 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1097 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1098 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1099 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1100 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1101 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1102 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1103 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1104 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1105 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1106 restore the old behaviour.
1107
1108 @kindex --as-needed
1109 @kindex --no-as-needed
1110 @item --as-needed
1111 @itemx --no-as-needed
1112 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1113 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1114 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1115 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1116 needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1117 for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1118 which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1119 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1120 linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
1121 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1122
1123 @kindex --add-needed
1124 @kindex --no-add-needed
1125 @item --add-needed
1126 @itemx --no-add-needed
1127 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1128 DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1129 the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1130 a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1131 @option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1132 for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1133 the default behaviour.
1134
1135 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1136 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1137 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1138
1139 @kindex -Bdynamic
1140 @kindex -dy
1141 @kindex -call_shared
1142 @item -Bdynamic
1143 @itemx -dy
1144 @itemx -call_shared
1145 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1146 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1147 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1148 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1149 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1150 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1151
1152 @kindex -Bgroup
1153 @item -Bgroup
1154 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1155 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1156 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1157 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1158 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1159
1160 @kindex -Bstatic
1161 @kindex -dn
1162 @kindex -non_shared
1163 @kindex -static
1164 @item -Bstatic
1165 @itemx -dn
1166 @itemx -non_shared
1167 @itemx -static
1168 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1169 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1170 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1171 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1172 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1173 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1174 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1175 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1176 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1177 libraries.
1178
1179 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1180 @item -Bsymbolic
1181 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1182 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1183 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1184 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1185 platforms which support shared libraries.
1186
1187 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1188 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1189 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1190 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1191 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1192 libraries.
1193
1194 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1195 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1196 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1197 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1198 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1199 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1200 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1201 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1202 which support shared libraries.
1203
1204 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1205 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1206
1207 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1208 @item --dynamic-list-data
1209 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1210
1211 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1212 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1213 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1214 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1215
1216 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1217 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1218 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1219
1220 @kindex --check-sections
1221 @kindex --no-check-sections
1222 @item --check-sections
1223 @itemx --no-check-sections
1224 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1225 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1226 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1227 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1228 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1229 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1230 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1231 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1232 option.
1233
1234 @cindex cross reference table
1235 @kindex --cref
1236 @item --cref
1237 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1238 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1239 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1240
1241 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1242 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1243 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1244 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1245 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1246
1247 @cindex common allocation
1248 @kindex --no-define-common
1249 @item --no-define-common
1250 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1251 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1252 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1253
1254 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1255 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1256 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1257 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1258 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1259 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1260 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1261 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1262 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1263 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1264
1265 @cindex symbols, from command line
1266 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1267 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1268 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1269 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1270 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1271 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1272 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1273 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1274 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1275 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1276 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1277 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1278 @var{expression}.
1279
1280 @cindex demangling, from command line
1281 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1282 @kindex --no-demangle
1283 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1284 @itemx --no-demangle
1285 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1286 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1287 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1288 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1289 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1290 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1291 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1292 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1293 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1294
1295 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1296 @kindex -I@var{file}
1297 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1298 @item -I@var{file}
1299 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1300 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1301 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1302 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1303 doing.
1304
1305 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1306 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1307 @item --fatal-warnings
1308 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1309 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1310 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1311
1312 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1313 @item --force-exe-suffix
1314 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1315
1316 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1317 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1318 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1319 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1320 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1321 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1322
1323 @kindex --gc-sections
1324 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1325 @cindex garbage collection
1326 @item --gc-sections
1327 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1328 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1329 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1330 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1331 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1332
1333 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1334 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1335 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1336 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1337 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1338 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1339 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1340 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1341 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1342
1343 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1344 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1345 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1346 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1347
1348 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1349 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1350 @cindex garbage collection
1351 @item --print-gc-sections
1352 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1353 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1354 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1355 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1356 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1357 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1358 line.
1359
1360 @cindex help
1361 @cindex usage
1362 @kindex --help
1363 @item --help
1364 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1365
1366 @kindex --target-help
1367 @item --target-help
1368 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1369
1370 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1371 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1372 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1373 @option{-M} option, above.
1374
1375 @cindex memory usage
1376 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1377 @item --no-keep-memory
1378 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1379 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1380 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1381 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1382 while linking a large executable.
1383
1384 @kindex --no-undefined
1385 @kindex -z defs
1386 @item --no-undefined
1387 @itemx -z defs
1388 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1389 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1390 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1391 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1392 libraries being linked in.
1393
1394 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1395 @kindex -z muldefs
1396 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1397 @itemx -z muldefs
1398 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1399 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1400 first definition will be used.
1401
1402 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1403 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1404 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1405 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1406 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1407 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1408 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1409 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1410 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1411
1412 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1413 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1414 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1415 a shared library.
1416
1417 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1418 libraries specified at link time are that:
1419
1420 @itemize @bullet
1421 @item
1422 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1423 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1424 resolvable at load time.
1425 @item
1426 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1427 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1428
1429 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1430 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1431 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1432 appropriate memset function.
1433 @end itemize
1434
1435 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1436 @item --no-undefined-version
1437 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1438 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1439 will be issued instead.
1440
1441 @kindex --default-symver
1442 @item --default-symver
1443 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1444 exported symbols.
1445
1446 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1447 @item --default-imported-symver
1448 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1449 imported symbols.
1450
1451 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1452 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1453 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1454 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1455 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1456 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1457 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1458 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1459 inappropriate.
1460
1461 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1462 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1463 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1464 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1465
1466 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1467 @item --no-whole-archive
1468 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1469 archive files.
1470
1471 @cindex output file after errors
1472 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1473 @item --noinhibit-exec
1474 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1475 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1476 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1477 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1478
1479 @kindex -nostdlib
1480 @item -nostdlib
1481 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1482 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1483 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1484
1485 @ifclear SingleFormat
1486 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1487 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1488 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1489 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1490 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1491 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1492 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1493 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1494 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1495 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1496 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1497 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1498 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1499 @end ifclear
1500
1501 @kindex -pie
1502 @kindex --pic-executable
1503 @item -pie
1504 @itemx --pic-executable
1505 @cindex position independent executables
1506 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1507 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1508 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1509 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1510 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1511 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1512
1513 @kindex -qmagic
1514 @item -qmagic
1515 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1516
1517 @kindex -Qy
1518 @item -Qy
1519 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1520
1521 @kindex --relax
1522 @cindex synthesizing linker
1523 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1524 @item --relax
1525 An option with machine dependent effects.
1526 @ifset GENERIC
1527 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1528 @end ifset
1529 @ifset H8300
1530 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1531 @end ifset
1532 @ifset I960
1533 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1534 @end ifset
1535 @ifset XTENSA
1536 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1537 @end ifset
1538 @ifset M68HC11
1539 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1540 @end ifset
1541 @ifset POWERPC
1542 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1543 @end ifset
1544
1545 On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1546 optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1547 in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1548 instructions in the output object file.
1549
1550 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1551 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1552 @ifset GENERIC
1553 This is known to be
1554 the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1555 @end ifset
1556
1557 @ifset GENERIC
1558 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1559 but ignored.
1560 @end ifset
1561
1562 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1563 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1564 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1565 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1566 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1567 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1568 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1569 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1570 @ifset GENERIC
1571 (such as VxWorks)
1572 @end ifset
1573 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1574 run-time memory.
1575
1576 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1577 or symbols needed for relocations.
1578
1579 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1580 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1581
1582 @ifset GENERIC
1583 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1584 @cindex runtime library search path
1585 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1586 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1587 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1588 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1589 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1590 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1591 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1592 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1593 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1594 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1595
1596 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1597 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1598 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1599 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1600 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1601 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1602 file systems.
1603
1604 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1605 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1606 the @option{-rpath} option.
1607 @end ifset
1608
1609 @ifset GENERIC
1610 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1611 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1612 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1613 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1614 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1615 of the input files.
1616
1617 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1618 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1619 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1620 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1621 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1622 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1623 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1624 appearing multiple times.
1625
1626 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1627 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1628 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1629 runtime linker would do.
1630
1631 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1632 libraries:
1633 @enumerate
1634 @item
1635 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1636 @item
1637 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1638 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1639 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1640 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1641 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1642 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1643 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1644 @item
1645 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1646 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1647 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1648 @item
1649 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1650 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1651 @item
1652 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1653 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1654 @item
1655 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1656 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1657 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1658 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1659 @item
1660 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1661 @item
1662 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1663 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1664 @end enumerate
1665
1666 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1667 warning and continue with the link.
1668 @end ifset
1669
1670 @kindex -shared
1671 @kindex -Bshareable
1672 @item -shared
1673 @itemx -Bshareable
1674 @cindex shared libraries
1675 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1676 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1677 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1678 undefined symbols in the link.
1679
1680 @kindex --sort-common
1681 @item --sort-common
1682 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1683 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1684 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1685 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1686 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1687 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1688 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1689 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1690
1691 @kindex --sort-section=name
1692 @item --sort-section=name
1693 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1694 patterns in the linker script.
1695
1696 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1697 @item --sort-section=alignment
1698 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1699 patterns in the linker script.
1700
1701 @kindex --split-by-file
1702 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1703 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1704 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1705 size of 1 if not given.
1706
1707 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1708 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1709 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1710 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1711 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1712 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1713 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1714 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1715 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1716 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1717 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1718 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1719
1720 @kindex --stats
1721 @item --stats
1722 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1723 as execution time and memory usage.
1724
1725 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1726 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1727 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1728 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1729 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1730
1731 @kindex --traditional-format
1732 @cindex traditional format
1733 @item --traditional-format
1734 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1735 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1736 use the traditional format instead.
1737
1738 @cindex dbx
1739 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1740 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1741 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1742 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1743 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1744 combine duplicate entries.
1745
1746 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1747 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1748 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1749 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1750 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1751 line.
1752 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1753 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1754 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1755 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1756 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1757
1758 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1759 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1760 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1761 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1762 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1763 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1764 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1765 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1766 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1767
1768 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1769 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1770 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1771 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1772 of the first byte of the text segment.
1773
1774 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1775 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1776 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1777 values for @samp{method}:
1778
1779 @table @samp
1780 @item ignore-all
1781 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1782
1783 @item report-all
1784 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1785
1786 @item ignore-in-object-files
1787 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1788 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1789
1790 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1791 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1792 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1793 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1794 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1795 command line.
1796 @end table
1797
1798 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1799 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1800
1801 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1802 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1803 can change this to a warning.
1804
1805 @kindex --verbose
1806 @cindex verbose
1807 @item --dll-verbose
1808 @itemx --verbose
1809 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1810 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1811 the linker script being used by the linker.
1812
1813 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1814 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1815 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1816 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1817 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1818 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1819 is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1820 @xref{VERSION}.
1821
1822 @kindex --warn-common
1823 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1824 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1825 @item --warn-common
1826 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1827 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1828 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1829 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1830 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1831 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1832
1833 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1834
1835 @table @samp
1836 @item int i = 1;
1837 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1838 file.
1839
1840 @item extern int i;
1841 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1842 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1843 variable somewhere.
1844
1845 @item int i;
1846 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1847 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1848 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1849 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1850 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1851 a definition of the same variable.
1852 @end table
1853
1854 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1855 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1856 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1857 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1858 a common symbol.
1859
1860 @enumerate
1861 @item
1862 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1863 definition for the symbol.
1864 @smallexample
1865 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overridden by definition
1867 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1868 @end smallexample
1869
1870 @item
1871 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1872 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1873 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1874 @smallexample
1875 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1876 overriding common
1877 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1878 @end smallexample
1879
1880 @item
1881 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1882 @smallexample
1883 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1884 of `@var{symbol}'
1885 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1886 @end smallexample
1887
1888 @item
1889 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1890 @smallexample
1891 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1892 overridden by larger common
1893 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1894 @end smallexample
1895
1896 @item
1897 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1898 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1899 encountered in a different order.
1900 @smallexample
1901 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1902 overriding smaller common
1903 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1904 @end smallexample
1905 @end enumerate
1906
1907 @kindex --warn-constructors
1908 @item --warn-constructors
1909 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1910 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1911 detect the use of global constructors.
1912
1913 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1914 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1915 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1916 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1917 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1918 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1919 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1920 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1921 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1922 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1923 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1924 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1925 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1926
1927 @kindex --warn-once
1928 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1929 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1930 @item --warn-once
1931 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1932 which refers to it.
1933
1934 @kindex --warn-section-align
1935 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1936 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1937 @item --warn-section-align
1938 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1939 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1940 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1941 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1942 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1943
1944 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1945 @item --warn-shared-textrel
1946 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1947
1948 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
1949 @item --warn-alternate-em
1950 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1951
1952 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1953 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1954 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1955 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1956 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1957
1958 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1959 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
1960 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1961 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1962
1963 @kindex --whole-archive
1964 @cindex including an entire archive
1965 @item --whole-archive
1966 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1967 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
1968 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1969 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1970 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1971 library. This option may be used more than once.
1972
1973 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1974 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1975 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
1976 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1977 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1978
1979 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1980 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
1981 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1982 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1983 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1984 @var{symbol}.
1985
1986 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1987 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1988 wishes to call the system function, it should call
1989 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1990
1991 Here is a trivial example:
1992
1993 @smallexample
1994 void *
1995 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1996 @{
1997 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1998 return __real_malloc (c);
1999 @}
2000 @end smallexample
2001
2002 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2003 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2004 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2005 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2006
2007 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2008 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2009 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2010 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2011 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2012
2013 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2014 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2015 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2016 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2017
2018 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2019 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2020 @item --enable-new-dtags
2021 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2022 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2023 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2024 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2025 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2026 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2027 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2028
2029 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2030 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2031 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2032 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2033 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2034 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2035 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2036
2037 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2038 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2039 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2040 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2041 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2042 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2043 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2044
2045 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2046 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2047 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2048 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2049 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2050 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2051
2052 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2053 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2054 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2055 has been used.
2056
2057 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2058 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2059
2060 @kindex --build-id
2061 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2062 @item --build-id
2063 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2064 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2065 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2066 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2067 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2068 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2069 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2070 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2071 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2072 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2073 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2074
2075 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2076 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2077 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2078 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2079 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2080 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2081
2082 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2083 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2084 @end table
2085
2086 @c man end
2087
2088 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2089
2090 @c man begin OPTIONS
2091
2092 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2093 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2094 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2095 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2096 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2097 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2098 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2099 object file).
2100
2101 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2102 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2103 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2104 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2105
2106 @table @gcctabopt
2107
2108 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2109 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2110 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2111 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2112 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2113
2114 @kindex --base-file
2115 @item --base-file @var{file}
2116 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2117 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2118 @file{dlltool}.
2119 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2120
2121 @kindex --dll
2122 @item --dll
2123 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2124 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2125 file.
2126 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2127
2128 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2129 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2130 @item --enable-long-section-names
2131 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2132 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2133 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2134 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2135 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2136 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2137 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2138 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2139 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2140 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2141 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2142 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2143 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2144 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2145 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2146 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2147 image and not stripping symbols.
2148 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2149
2150 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2151 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2152 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2153 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2154 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2155 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2156 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2157 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2158 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2159 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2160 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2161 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2162 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2163 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2164 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2165 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2166 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2167 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2168
2169 @cindex DLLs, creating
2170 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2171 @item --export-all-symbols
2172 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2173 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2174 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2175 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2176 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2177 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2178 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2179 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2180 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2181 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2182 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2183 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2184 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2185 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2186 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2187 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2188 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2189 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2190 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2191 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2192 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2193 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2194 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2195
2196 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2197 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2198 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2199 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2200 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2201
2202 @kindex --file-alignment
2203 @item --file-alignment
2204 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2205 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2206 512.
2207 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2208
2209 @cindex heap size
2210 @kindex --heap
2211 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2212 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2213 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2214 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2215 committed.
2216 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2217
2218 @cindex image base
2219 @kindex --image-base
2220 @item --image-base @var{value}
2221 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2222 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2223 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2224 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2225 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2226 for dlls.
2227 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2228
2229 @kindex --kill-at
2230 @item --kill-at
2231 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2232 symbols before they are exported.
2233 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2234
2235 @kindex --large-address-aware
2236 @item --large-address-aware
2237 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2238 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2239 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2240 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2241 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2242 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2243
2244 @kindex --major-image-version
2245 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2246 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2247 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2248
2249 @kindex --major-os-version
2250 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2251 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2252 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2253
2254 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2255 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2256 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2257 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2258
2259 @kindex --minor-image-version
2260 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2261 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2262 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2263
2264 @kindex --minor-os-version
2265 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2266 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2267 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2268
2269 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2270 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2271 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2272 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2273
2274 @cindex DEF files, creating
2275 @cindex DLLs, creating
2276 @kindex --output-def
2277 @item --output-def @var{file}
2278 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2279 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2280 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2281 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2282 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2283 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2284
2285 @cindex DLLs, creating
2286 @kindex --out-implib
2287 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2288 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2289 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2290 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2291 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2292 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2293 creation step.
2294 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2295
2296 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2297 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2298 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2299 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2300 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2301 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2302 avoided.
2303 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2304
2305 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2306 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2307 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2308 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2309 default.
2310 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2311
2312 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2313 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2314 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2315 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2316 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2317 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2318 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2319 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2320 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2321 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2322
2323 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2324 @item --enable-auto-import
2325 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2326 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2327 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2328 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2329 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2330 specification published by Microsoft.
2331
2332 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2333 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2334 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2335 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2336 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2337
2338 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2339 see this message:
2340
2341 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2342 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2343
2344 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2345 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2346 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2347 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2348 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2349 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2350 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2351 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2352 the warning, and exit.
2353
2354 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2355 data type of the exported variable:
2356
2357 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2358 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2359 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2360
2361 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2362 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2363 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2364 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2365
2366 @example
2367 extern type extern_array[];
2368 extern_array[1] -->
2369 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2370 @end example
2371
2372 or
2373
2374 @example
2375 extern type extern_array[];
2376 extern_array[1] -->
2377 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2378 @end example
2379
2380 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2381 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2382
2383 @example
2384 extern struct s extern_struct;
2385 extern_struct.field -->
2386 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2387 @end example
2388
2389 or
2390
2391 @example
2392 extern long long extern_ll;
2393 extern_ll -->
2394 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2395 @end example
2396
2397 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2398 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2399 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2400 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2401 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2402 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2403 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2404 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2405
2406 Original:
2407 @example
2408 --foo.h
2409 extern int arr[];
2410 --foo.c
2411 #include "foo.h"
2412 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2413 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2414 @}
2415 @end example
2416
2417 Solution 1:
2418 @example
2419 --foo.h
2420 extern int arr[];
2421 --foo.c
2422 #include "foo.h"
2423 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2424 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2425 volatile int *parr = arr;
2426 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2427 @}
2428 @end example
2429
2430 Solution 2:
2431 @example
2432 --foo.h
2433 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2434 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2435 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2436 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2437 #else
2438 #define FOO_IMPORT
2439 #endif
2440 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2441 --foo.c
2442 #include "foo.h"
2443 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2444 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2445 @}
2446 @end example
2447
2448 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2449 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2450 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2451 functions).
2452 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2453
2454 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2455 @item --disable-auto-import
2456 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2457 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2458 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2459
2460 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2461 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2462 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2463 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2464 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2465 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2466 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2467
2468 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2469 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2470 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2471 DLLs. This is the default.
2472 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2473
2474 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2475 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2476 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @kindex --section-alignment
2480 @item --section-alignment
2481 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2482 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @cindex stack size
2486 @kindex --stack
2487 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2488 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2489 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2490 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2491 committed.
2492 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2493
2494 @kindex --subsystem
2495 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2496 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2497 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2498 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2499 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2500 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2501 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2502 @var{which}.
2503 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2504
2505 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2506 of the PE file header:
2507 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2508
2509 @kindex --dynamicbase
2510 @item --dynamicbase
2511 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2512 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2513 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2514
2515 @kindex --forceinteg
2516 @item --forceinteg
2517 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2518
2519 @kindex --nxcompat
2520 @item --nxcompat
2521 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2522 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2523
2524 @kindex --no-isolation
2525 @item --no-isolation
2526 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2527
2528 @kindex --no-seh
2529 @item --no-seh
2530 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2531 this image.
2532
2533 @kindex --no-bind
2534 @item --no-bind
2535 Do not bind this image.
2536
2537 @kindex --wdmdriver
2538 @item --wdmdriver
2539 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2540
2541 @kindex --tsaware
2542 @item --tsaware
2543 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2544
2545 @end table
2546
2547 @c man end
2548
2549 @ifset M68HC11
2550 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2551
2552 @c man begin OPTIONS
2553
2554 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2555 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2556
2557 @table @gcctabopt
2558
2559 @kindex --no-trampoline
2560 @item --no-trampoline
2561 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2562 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2563 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2564
2565 @kindex --bank-window
2566 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2567 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2568 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2569 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2570 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2571
2572 @end table
2573
2574 @c man end
2575 @end ifset
2576
2577 @ifset M68K
2578 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2579
2580 @c man begin OPTIONS
2581
2582 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2583 when linking for 68K targets.
2584
2585 @table @gcctabopt
2586
2587 @kindex --got
2588 @item --got=@var{type}
2589 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2590 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2591 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2592 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2593
2594 @end table
2595
2596 @c man end
2597 @end ifset
2598
2599 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2600 @node Environment
2601 @section Environment Variables
2602
2603 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2604
2605 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2606 @ifclear SingleFormat
2607 @code{GNUTARGET},
2608 @end ifclear
2609 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2610
2611 @ifclear SingleFormat
2612 @kindex GNUTARGET
2613 @cindex default input format
2614 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2615 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2616 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2617 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2618 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2619 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2620 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2621 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2622 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2623 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2624 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2625 @end ifclear
2626
2627 @kindex LDEMULATION
2628 @cindex default emulation
2629 @cindex emulation, default
2630 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2631 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2632 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2633 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2634 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2635 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2636 linker was configured.
2637
2638 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2639 @cindex demangling, default
2640 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2641 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2642 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2643 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2644 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2645 options.
2646
2647 @c man end
2648 @end ifset
2649
2650 @node Scripts
2651 @chapter Linker Scripts
2652
2653 @cindex scripts
2654 @cindex linker scripts
2655 @cindex command files
2656 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2657 written in the linker command language.
2658
2659 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2660 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2661 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2662 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2663 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2664 described below.
2665
2666 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2667 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2668 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2669 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2670 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2671
2672 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2673 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2674 default linker script.
2675
2676 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2677 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2678 Linker Scripts}.
2679
2680 @menu
2681 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2682 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2683 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2684 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2685 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2686 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2687 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2688 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2689 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2690 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2691 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2692 @end menu
2693
2694 @node Basic Script Concepts
2695 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2696 @cindex linker script concepts
2697 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2698 describe the linker script language.
2699
2700 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2701 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2702 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2703 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2704 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2705 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2706 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2707 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2708
2709 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2710 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2711 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2712 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2713 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2714 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2715 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2716 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2717 of debugging information.
2718
2719 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2720 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2721 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2722 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2723 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2724 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2725 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2726 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2727 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2728 RAM address would be the VMA.
2729
2730 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2731 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2732
2733 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2734 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2735 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2736 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2737 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2738 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2739 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2740
2741 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2742 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2743 option.
2744
2745 @node Script Format
2746 @section Linker Script Format
2747 @cindex linker script format
2748 Linker scripts are text files.
2749
2750 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2751 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2752 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2753 generally ignored.
2754
2755 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2756 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2757 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2758 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2759 file name.
2760
2761 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2762 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2763 to whitespace.
2764
2765 @node Simple Example
2766 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2767 @cindex linker script example
2768 @cindex example of linker script
2769 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2770
2771 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2772 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2773 memory layout of the output file.
2774
2775 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2776 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2777 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2778 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2779 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2780 your input files.
2781
2782 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2783 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2784 linker script which will do that:
2785 @smallexample
2786 SECTIONS
2787 @{
2788 . = 0x10000;
2789 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2790 . = 0x8000000;
2791 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2792 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2793 @}
2794 @end smallexample
2795
2796 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2797 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2798 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2799
2800 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2801 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2802 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2803 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2804 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2805 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2806 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2807
2808 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2809 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2810 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2811 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2812 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2813 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2814
2815 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2816 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2817 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2818
2819 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2820 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2821 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2822 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2823 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2824 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2825 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2826
2827 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2828 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2829 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2830 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2831 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2832 sections.
2833
2834 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2835
2836 @node Simple Commands
2837 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2838 @cindex linker script simple commands
2839 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2840
2841 @menu
2842 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2843 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2844 @ifclear SingleFormat
2845 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2846 @end ifclear
2847
2848 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2849 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2850 @end menu
2851
2852 @node Entry Point
2853 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2854 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2855 @cindex start of execution
2856 @cindex first instruction
2857 @cindex entry point
2858 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2859 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2860 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2861 @smallexample
2862 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2863 @end smallexample
2864
2865 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2866 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2867 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2868 @itemize @bullet
2869 @item
2870 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2871 @item
2872 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2873 @item
2874 the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
2875 @item
2876 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2877 @item
2878 The address @code{0}.
2879 @end itemize
2880
2881 @node File Commands
2882 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2883 @cindex linker script file commands
2884 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2885
2886 @table @code
2887 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2888 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2889 @cindex including a linker script
2890 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2891 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2892 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2893 10 levels deep.
2894
2895 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2896 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2897
2898 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2899 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2900 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2901 @cindex input files in linker scripts
2902 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
2903 @cindex linker script input object files
2904 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2905 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2906
2907 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2908 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2909 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2910
2911 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2912 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2913
2914 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2915 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2916 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2917 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2918 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2919 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2920 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2921
2922 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2923 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2924 @samp{-l}.
2925
2926 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2927 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2928 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2929
2930 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2931 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2932 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2933 @cindex grouping input files
2934 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2935 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2936 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2937 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2938
2939 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2940 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2941 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2942 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2943 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2944 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2945 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2946 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2947 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2948 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2949 setting afterwards.
2950
2951 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2952 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2953 @cindex output file name in linker script
2954 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2955 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2956 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2957 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2958 precedence.
2959
2960 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2961 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2962
2963 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2964 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2965 @cindex library search path in linker script
2966 @cindex archive search path in linker script
2967 @cindex search path in linker script
2968 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
2969 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
2970 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2971 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2972 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2973 the command line option are searched first.
2974
2975 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2976 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2977 @cindex first input file
2978 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2979 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2980 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2981 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2982 first file.
2983 @end table
2984
2985 @ifclear SingleFormat
2986 @node Format Commands
2987 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2988 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2989
2990 @table @code
2991 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2992 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2993 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2994 @cindex output file format in linker script
2995 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2996 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
2997 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2998 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2999 line option takes precedence.
3000
3001 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3002 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3003 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3004 desired endianness.
3005
3006 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3007 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3008 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3009 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3010
3011 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3012 command:
3013 @smallexample
3014 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3015 @end smallexample
3016 This says that the default format for the output file is
3017 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3018 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3019 format.
3020
3021 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3022 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3023 @cindex input file format in linker script
3024 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3025 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3026 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3027 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3028 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3029 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3030 @end table
3031 @end ifclear
3032
3033 @node REGION_ALIAS
3034 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3035 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3036 @cindex region alias
3037 @cindex region names
3038
3039 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3040 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3041
3042 @smallexample
3043 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3044 @end smallexample
3045
3046 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3047 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3048 to memory regions. An example follows.
3049
3050 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3051 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3052 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3053 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3054 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3055 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3056 sections:
3057
3058 @itemize @bullet
3059 @item
3060 @code{.text} program code;
3061 @item
3062 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3063 @item
3064 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3065 @item
3066 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3067 @end itemize
3068
3069 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3070 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3071 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3072 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3073 @code{C}:
3074 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3075 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3076 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3077 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3078 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3079 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3080 @end multitable
3081 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3082 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3083 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3084 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3085
3086 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3087 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3088 memory layout:
3089 @smallexample
3090 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3091
3092 SECTIONS
3093 @{
3094 .text :
3095 @{
3096 *(.text)
3097 @} > REGION_TEXT
3098 .rodata :
3099 @{
3100 *(.rodata)
3101 rodata_end = .;
3102 @} > REGION_RODATA
3103 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3104 @{
3105 data_start = .;
3106 *(.data)
3107 @} > REGION_DATA
3108 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3109 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3110 .bss :
3111 @{
3112 *(.bss)
3113 @} > REGION_BSS
3114 @}
3115 @end smallexample
3116
3117 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3118 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3119 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3120 @table @code
3121 @item A
3122 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3123 @smallexample
3124 MEMORY
3125 @{
3126 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3127 @}
3128
3129 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3130 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3131 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3132 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3133 @end smallexample
3134 @item B
3135 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3136 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3137 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3138 @smallexample
3139 MEMORY
3140 @{
3141 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3142 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3143 @}
3144
3145 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3146 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3147 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3148 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3149 @end smallexample
3150 @item C
3151 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3152 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3153 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3154 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3155 @smallexample
3156 MEMORY
3157 @{
3158 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3159 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3160 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3161 @}
3162
3163 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3164 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3165 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3166 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3167 @end smallexample
3168 @end table
3169
3170 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3171 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3172 necessary:
3173 @smallexample
3174 #include <string.h>
3175
3176 extern char data_start [];
3177 extern char data_size [];
3178 extern char data_load_start [];
3179
3180 void copy_data(void)
3181 @{
3182 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3183 @{
3184 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3185 @}
3186 @}
3187 @end smallexample
3188
3189 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3190 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3191 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3192
3193 @table @code
3194 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3195 @kindex ASSERT
3196 @cindex assertion in linker script
3197 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3198 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3199
3200 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3201 @kindex EXTERN
3202 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3203 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3204 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3205 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3206 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3207 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3208
3209 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3210 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3211 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3212 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3213 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3214 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3215
3216 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3217 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3218 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3219 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3220 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3221 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3222
3223 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3224 @kindex INSERT
3225 @cindex insert user script into default script
3226 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3227 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3228 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3229 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3230 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3231 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3232 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3233 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3234 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3235 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3236 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3237 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3238 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3239
3240 @smallexample
3241 SECTIONS
3242 @{
3243 OVERLAY :
3244 @{
3245 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3246 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3247 @}
3248 @}
3249 INSERT AFTER .text;
3250 @end smallexample
3251
3252 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3253 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3254 @cindex cross references
3255 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3256 references among certain output sections.
3257
3258 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3259 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3260 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3261 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3262 a function defined in the other section.
3263
3264 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3265 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3266 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3267 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3268 names.
3269
3270 @ifclear SingleFormat
3271 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3272 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3273 @cindex machine architecture
3274 @cindex architecture
3275 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3276 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3277 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3278 the @samp{-f} option.
3279 @end ifclear
3280 @end table
3281
3282 @node Assignments
3283 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3284 @cindex assignment in scripts
3285 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3286 @cindex variables, defining
3287 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3288 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3289
3290 @menu
3291 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3292 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3293 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3294 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3295 @end menu
3296
3297 @node Simple Assignments
3298 @subsection Simple Assignments
3299
3300 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3301
3302 @table @code
3303 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3304 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3305 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3306 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3307 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3308 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3309 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3310 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3311 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3312 @end table
3313
3314 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3315 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3316 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3317
3318 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3319 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3320
3321 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3322
3323 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3324
3325 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3326 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3327 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3328
3329 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3330 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3331
3332 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3333 assignments may be used:
3334
3335 @smallexample
3336 floating_point = 0;
3337 SECTIONS
3338 @{
3339 .text :
3340 @{
3341 *(.text)
3342 _etext = .;
3343 @}
3344 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3345 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3346 @}
3347 @end smallexample
3348 @noindent
3349 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3350 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3351 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3352 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3353 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3354
3355 @node PROVIDE
3356 @subsection PROVIDE
3357 @cindex PROVIDE
3358 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3359 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3360 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3361 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3362 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3363 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3364 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3365 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3366
3367 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3368 @smallexample
3369 SECTIONS
3370 @{
3371 .text :
3372 @{
3373 *(.text)
3374 _etext = .;
3375 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3376 @}
3377 @}
3378 @end smallexample
3379
3380 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3381 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3382 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3383 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3384 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3385 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3386
3387 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3388 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3389 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3390 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3391 hidden and won't be exported.
3392
3393 @node Source Code Reference
3394 @subsection Source Code Reference
3395
3396 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3397 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3398 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3399 symbol that does not have a value.
3400
3401 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3402 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3403 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3404 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3405 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3406 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3407 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3408 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3409
3410 @smallexample
3411 extern int foo;
3412 @end smallexample
3413
3414 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3415
3416 @smallexample
3417 _foo = 1000;
3418 @end smallexample
3419
3420 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3421 transformation has taken place.
3422
3423 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3424 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3425 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3426 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3427 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3428 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3429 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3430
3431 @smallexample
3432 int foo = 1000;
3433 @end smallexample
3434
3435 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3436 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3437 number 1000 is initially stored.
3438
3439 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3440 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3441 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3442 So:
3443
3444 @smallexample
3445 foo = 1;
3446 @end smallexample
3447
3448 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3449 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3450 address. Whereas:
3451
3452 @smallexample
3453 int * a = & foo;
3454 @end smallexample
3455
3456 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3457 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3458 the variable @samp{a}.
3459
3460 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3461 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3462 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3463
3464 @smallexample
3465 foo = 1000;
3466 @end smallexample
3467
3468 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3469 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3470 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3471 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3472 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3473
3474 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3475 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3476 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3477 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3478 linker script contains these declarations:
3479
3480 @smallexample
3481 @group
3482 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3483 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3484 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3485 @end group
3486 @end smallexample
3487
3488 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3489
3490 @smallexample
3491 @group
3492 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3493
3494 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3495 @end group
3496 @end smallexample
3497
3498 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3499
3500 @node SECTIONS
3501 @section SECTIONS Command
3502 @kindex SECTIONS
3503 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3504 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3505
3506 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3507 @smallexample
3508 SECTIONS
3509 @{
3510 @var{sections-command}
3511 @var{sections-command}
3512 @dots{}
3513 @}
3514 @end smallexample
3515
3516 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3517
3518 @itemize @bullet
3519 @item
3520 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3521 @item
3522 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3523 @item
3524 an output section description
3525 @item
3526 an overlay description
3527 @end itemize
3528
3529 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3530 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3531 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3532 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3533 the layout of the output file.
3534
3535 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3536 below.
3537
3538 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3539 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3540 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3541 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3542 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3543 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3544
3545 @menu
3546 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3547 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3548 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3549 * Input Section:: Input section description
3550 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3551 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3552 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3553 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3554 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3555 @end menu
3556
3557 @node Output Section Description
3558 @subsection Output Section Description
3559 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3560 @smallexample
3561 @group
3562 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3563 [AT(@var{lma})]
3564 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3565 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3566 [@var{constraint}]
3567 @{
3568 @var{output-section-command}
3569 @var{output-section-command}
3570 @dots{}
3571 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3572 @end group
3573 @end smallexample
3574
3575 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3576
3577 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3578 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3579 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3580
3581 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3582
3583 @itemize @bullet
3584 @item
3585 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3586 @item
3587 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3588 @item
3589 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3590 @item
3591 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3592 @end itemize
3593
3594 @node Output Section Name
3595 @subsection Output Section Name
3596 @cindex name, section
3597 @cindex section name
3598 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3599 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3600 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3601 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3602 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3603 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3604 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3605 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3606 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3607 commas must be quoted.
3608
3609 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3610 Discarding}.
3611
3612 @node Output Section Address
3613 @subsection Output Section Address
3614 @cindex address, section
3615 @cindex section address
3616 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3617 address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3618 the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3619 based on the current value of the location counter.
3620
3621 If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3622 set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3623 @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3624 current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3625 requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3626 output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3627 within the output section.
3628
3629 For example,
3630 @smallexample
3631 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3632 @end smallexample
3633 @noindent
3634 and
3635 @smallexample
3636 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3637 @end smallexample
3638 @noindent
3639 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3640 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3641 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3642 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3643 section.
3644
3645 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3646 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3647 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3648 do something like this:
3649 @smallexample
3650 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3651 @end smallexample
3652 @noindent
3653 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3654 aligned upward to the specified value.
3655
3656 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3657 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3658 sections are ignored).
3659
3660 @node Input Section
3661 @subsection Input Section Description
3662 @cindex input sections
3663 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3664 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3665
3666 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3667 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3668 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3669 map the input files into your memory layout.
3670
3671 @menu
3672 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3673 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3674 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3675 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3676 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3677 @end menu
3678
3679 @node Input Section Basics
3680 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3681 @cindex input section basics
3682 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3683 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3684
3685 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3686 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3687
3688 The most common input section description is to include all input
3689 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3690 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3691 @smallexample
3692 *(.text)
3693 @end smallexample
3694 @noindent
3695 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3696 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3697 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3698 example:
3699 @smallexample
3700 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3701 @end smallexample
3702 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3703 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3704
3705 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3706 @smallexample
3707 *(.text .rdata)
3708 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3709 @end smallexample
3710 @noindent
3711 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3712 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3713 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3714 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3715 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3716 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3717
3718 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3719 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3720 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3721 @smallexample
3722 data.o(.data)
3723 @end smallexample
3724
3725 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3726 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3727 with no whitespace around the colon.
3728
3729 @table @samp
3730 @item archive:file
3731 matches file within archive
3732 @item archive:
3733 matches the whole archive
3734 @item :file
3735 matches file but not one in an archive
3736 @end table
3737
3738 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3739 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3740 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3741 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3742 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3743 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3744 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3745 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3746 command.
3747
3748 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3749 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3750 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3751 @smallexample
3752 data.o
3753 @end smallexample
3754
3755 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3756 and does not contain any wild card
3757 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3758 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3759 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3760 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3761 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3762 the archive search path.
3763
3764 @node Input Section Wildcards
3765 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3766 @cindex input section wildcards
3767 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3768 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3769 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3770 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3771 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3772
3773 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3774 pattern for the file name.
3775
3776 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3777
3778 @table @samp
3779 @item *
3780 matches any number of characters
3781 @item ?
3782 matches any single character
3783 @item [@var{chars}]
3784 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3785 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3786 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3787 @item \
3788 quotes the following character
3789 @end table
3790
3791 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3792 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3793 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3794 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3795 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3796 a @samp{/} character.
3797
3798 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3799 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3800 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3801
3802 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3803 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3804 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3805 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3806 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3807 @smallexample
3808 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3809 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3810 @end smallexample
3811
3812 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3813 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3814 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3815 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3816 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3817 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3818 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3819
3820 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3821 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3822 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3823 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3824
3825 @cindex SORT
3826 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3827
3828 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3829 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3830
3831 @enumerate
3832 @item
3833 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3834 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3835 sections have the same name.
3836 @item
3837 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3838 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3839 sections have the same alignment.
3840 @item
3841 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3842 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3843 @item
3844 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3845 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3846 @item
3847 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3848 @end enumerate
3849
3850 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3851 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3852 takes precedence over the command line option.
3853
3854 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3855 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3856 treated as nested sorting command.
3857
3858 @enumerate
3859 @item
3860 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3861 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3862 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3863 @item
3864 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3865 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3866 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3867 @end enumerate
3868
3869 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3870 command line option will be ignored.
3871
3872 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3873 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3874 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3875
3876 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3877 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3878 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3879 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3880 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3881 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3882 @smallexample
3883 @group
3884 SECTIONS @{
3885 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3886 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3887 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3888 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3889 @}
3890 @end group
3891 @end smallexample
3892
3893 @node Input Section Common
3894 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3895 @cindex common symbol placement
3896 @cindex uninitialized data placement
3897 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3898 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3899 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3900 named @samp{COMMON}.
3901
3902 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3903 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3904 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3905 input files are placed in another section.
3906
3907 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3908 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3909 @smallexample
3910 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3911 @end smallexample
3912
3913 @cindex scommon section
3914 @cindex small common symbols
3915 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3916 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3917 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3918 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3919 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3920 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3921 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3922 locations.
3923
3924 @cindex [COMMON]
3925 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3926 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3927 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
3928
3929 @node Input Section Keep
3930 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
3931 @cindex KEEP
3932 @cindex garbage collection
3933 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
3934 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
3935 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3936 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
3937 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
3938
3939 @node Input Section Example
3940 @subsubsection Input Section Example
3941 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3942 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3943 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3944 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3945 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3946 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3947 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3948 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3949 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3950
3951 @smallexample
3952 @group
3953 SECTIONS @{
3954 outputa 0x10000 :
3955 @{
3956 all.o
3957 foo.o (.input1)
3958 @}
3959 @end group
3960 @group
3961 outputb :
3962 @{
3963 foo.o (.input2)
3964 foo1.o (.input1)
3965 @}
3966 @end group
3967 @group
3968 outputc :
3969 @{
3970 *(.input1)
3971 *(.input2)
3972 @}
3973 @}
3974 @end group
3975 @end smallexample
3976
3977 @node Output Section Data
3978 @subsection Output Section Data
3979 @cindex data
3980 @cindex section data
3981 @cindex output section data
3982 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3983 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3984 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3985 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3986 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3987 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3988 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3989 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3990 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3991 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3992 counter.
3993
3994 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3995 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3996 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3997 stored.
3998
3999 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4000 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4001 @smallexample
4002 BYTE(1)
4003 LONG(addr)
4004 @end smallexample
4005
4006 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4007 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4008 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4009 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4010 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4011
4012 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4013 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4014 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4015 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4016 endianness of the first input object file.
4017
4018 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4019 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4020 @smallexample
4021 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4022 @end smallexample
4023 whereas this will work:
4024 @smallexample
4025 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4026 @end smallexample
4027
4028 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4029 @cindex holes, filling
4030 @cindex unspecified memory
4031 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4032 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4033 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4034 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4035 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4036 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4037 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4038 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4039 different parts of an output section.
4040
4041 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4042 value @samp{0x90}:
4043 @smallexample
4044 FILL(0x90909090)
4045 @end smallexample
4046
4047 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4048 section attribute, but it only affects the
4049 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4050 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4051 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4052 expression.
4053
4054 @node Output Section Keywords
4055 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4056 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4057 commands.
4058
4059 @table @code
4060 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4061 @cindex input filename symbols
4062 @cindex filename symbols
4063 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4064 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4065 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4066 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4067 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4068
4069 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4070 normally used for any other object file format.
4071
4072 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4073 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4074 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4075 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4076 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4077 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4078 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4079 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4080 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4081 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4082 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4083 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4084 ignored for other object file formats.
4085
4086 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4087 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4088 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4089 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4090 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4091 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4092 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4093 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4094 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4095 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4096 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4097 @code{exit}.
4098
4099 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4100 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4101 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4102 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4103 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4104 runtime code expects to see.
4105
4106 @smallexample
4107 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4108 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4109 *(.ctors)
4110 LONG(0)
4111 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4112 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4113 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4114 *(.dtors)
4115 LONG(0)
4116 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4117 @end smallexample
4118
4119 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4120 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4121 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4122 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4123 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4124 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4125 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4126 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4127
4128 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4129 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4130 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4131 scripts.
4132
4133 @end table
4134
4135 @node Output Section Discarding
4136 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4137 @cindex discarding sections
4138 @cindex sections, discarding
4139 @cindex removing sections
4140 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4141 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4142 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4143 @smallexample
4144 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4145 @end smallexample
4146 @noindent
4147 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4148 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4149 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4150 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4151
4152 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4153 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4154 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4155 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4156 section is discarded.
4157
4158 @cindex /DISCARD/
4159 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4160 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4161 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4162
4163 @node Output Section Attributes
4164 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4165 @cindex output section attributes
4166 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4167 like this:
4168
4169 @smallexample
4170 @group
4171 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4172 [AT(@var{lma})]
4173 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4174 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4175 [@var{constraint}]
4176 @{
4177 @var{output-section-command}
4178 @var{output-section-command}
4179 @dots{}
4180 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4181 @end group
4182 @end smallexample
4183
4184 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4185 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4186 remaining section attributes.
4187
4188 @menu
4189 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4190 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4191 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4192 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4193 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4194 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4195 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4196 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4197 @end menu
4198
4199 @node Output Section Type
4200 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4201 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4202 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4203
4204 @table @code
4205 @item NOLOAD
4206 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4207 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4208 @item DSECT
4209 @itemx COPY
4210 @itemx INFO
4211 @itemx OVERLAY
4212 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4213 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4214 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4215 section when the program is run.
4216 @end table
4217
4218 @kindex NOLOAD
4219 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4220 @cindex loading, preventing
4221 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4222 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4223 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4224 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4225 need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4226 @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4227 @smallexample
4228 @group
4229 SECTIONS @{
4230 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4231 @dots{}
4232 @}
4233 @end group
4234 @end smallexample
4235
4236 @node Output Section LMA
4237 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4238 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4239 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4240 @cindex load address
4241 @cindex section load address
4242 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4243 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4244 an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4245 Address}).
4246
4247 The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4248 the load address of the section.
4249
4250 Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4251 specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4252 Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4253 linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
4254
4255 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4256 section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4257 VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4258 section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4259 or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4260 to the VMA.
4261 @xref{Output Section Region}.
4262
4263 @cindex ROM initialized data
4264 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4265 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4266 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4267 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4268 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4269 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4270 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4271 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4272 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4273
4274 @smallexample
4275 @group
4276 SECTIONS
4277 @{
4278 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4279 .mdata 0x2000 :
4280 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4281 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4282 .bss 0x3000 :
4283 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4284 @}
4285 @end group
4286 @end smallexample
4287
4288 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4289 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4290 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4291 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4292 script.
4293
4294 @smallexample
4295 @group
4296 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4297 char *src = &_etext;
4298 char *dst = &_data;
4299
4300 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4301 while (dst < &_edata) @{
4302 *dst++ = *src++;
4303 @}
4304
4305 /* Zero bss */
4306 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4307 *dst = 0;
4308 @end group
4309 @end smallexample
4310
4311 @node Forced Output Alignment
4312 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4313 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4314 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4315 @cindex output section alignment
4316 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4317
4318 @node Forced Input Alignment
4319 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4320 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4321 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4322 @cindex input section alignment
4323 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4324 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4325 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4326
4327 @node Output Section Constraint
4328 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4329 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4330 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4331 @cindex constraints on output sections
4332 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4333 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4334 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4335 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4336
4337 @node Output Section Region
4338 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4339 @kindex >@var{region}
4340 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4341 @cindex memory regions and sections
4342 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4343 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4344
4345 Here is a simple example:
4346 @smallexample
4347 @group
4348 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4349 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4350 @end group
4351 @end smallexample
4352
4353 @node Output Section Phdr
4354 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4355 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4356 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4357 @cindex program headers and sections
4358 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4359 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4360 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4361 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4362 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4363 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4364
4365 Here is a simple example:
4366 @smallexample
4367 @group
4368 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4369 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4370 @end group
4371 @end smallexample
4372
4373 @node Output Section Fill
4374 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4375 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4376 @cindex section fill pattern
4377 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4378 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4379 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4380 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4381 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4382 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4383 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4384 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4385 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4386 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4387 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4388 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4389 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4390
4391 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4392 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4393
4394 Here is a simple example:
4395 @smallexample
4396 @group
4397 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4398 @end group
4399 @end smallexample
4400
4401 @node Overlay Description
4402 @subsection Overlay Description
4403 @kindex OVERLAY
4404 @cindex overlays
4405 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4406 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4407 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4408 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4409 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4410 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4411 than another.
4412
4413 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4414 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4415 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4416 command is as follows:
4417 @smallexample
4418 @group
4419 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4420 @{
4421 @var{secname1}
4422 @{
4423 @var{output-section-command}
4424 @var{output-section-command}
4425 @dots{}
4426 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4427 @var{secname2}
4428 @{
4429 @var{output-section-command}
4430 @var{output-section-command}
4431 @dots{}
4432 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4433 @dots{}
4434 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4435 @end group
4436 @end smallexample
4437
4438 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4439 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4440 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4441 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4442 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4443 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4444
4445 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4446 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4447 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4448 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4449 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4450 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4451
4452 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4453 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4454 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4455 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4456 NOCROSSREFS}.
4457
4458 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4459 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4460 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4461 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4462 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4463 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4464 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4465
4466 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4467 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4468
4469 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4470 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4471 @smallexample
4472 @group
4473 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4474 @{
4475 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4476 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4477 @}
4478 @end group
4479 @end smallexample
4480 @noindent
4481 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4482 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4483 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4484 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4485 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4486 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4487
4488 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4489 like the following.
4490
4491 @smallexample
4492 @group
4493 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4494 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4495 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4496 @end group
4497 @end smallexample
4498
4499 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4500 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4501 example could have been written identically as follows.
4502
4503 @smallexample
4504 @group
4505 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4506 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4507 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4508 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4509 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4510 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4511 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4512 @end group
4513 @end smallexample
4514
4515 @node MEMORY
4516 @section MEMORY Command
4517 @kindex MEMORY
4518 @cindex memory regions
4519 @cindex regions of memory
4520 @cindex allocating memory
4521 @cindex discontinuous memory
4522 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4523 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4524
4525 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4526 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4527 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4528 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4529 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4530 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4531 around to fit into the available regions.
4532
4533 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4534 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4535 you wish. The syntax is:
4536 @smallexample
4537 @group
4538 MEMORY
4539 @{
4540 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4541 @dots{}
4542 @}
4543 @end group
4544 @end smallexample
4545
4546 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4547 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4548 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4549 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4550 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4551 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4552 command.
4553
4554 @cindex memory region attributes
4555 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4556 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4557 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4558 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4559 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4560 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4561 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4562
4563 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4564 @table @samp
4565 @item R
4566 Read-only section
4567 @item W
4568 Read/write section
4569 @item X
4570 Executable section
4571 @item A
4572 Allocatable section
4573 @item I
4574 Initialized section
4575 @item L
4576 Same as @samp{I}
4577 @item !
4578 Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4579 @end table
4580
4581 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4582 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4583 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4584 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4585 attributes.
4586
4587 @kindex ORIGIN =
4588 @kindex o =
4589 @kindex org =
4590 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4591 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4592 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4593 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4594 @code{ORG}).
4595
4596 @kindex LENGTH =
4597 @kindex len =
4598 @kindex l =
4599 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4600 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4601 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4602 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4603
4604 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4605 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4606 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4607 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4608 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4609 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4610 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4611 region.
4612
4613 @smallexample
4614 @group
4615 MEMORY
4616 @{
4617 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4618 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4619 @}
4620 @end group
4621 @end smallexample
4622
4623 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4624 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4625 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4626 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4627 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4628 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4629 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4630 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4631 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4632
4633 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4634 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4635 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4636
4637 @smallexample
4638 @group
4639 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4640 @end group
4641 @end smallexample
4642
4643 @node PHDRS
4644 @section PHDRS Command
4645 @kindex PHDRS
4646 @cindex program headers
4647 @cindex ELF program headers
4648 @cindex program segments
4649 @cindex segments, ELF
4650 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4651 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4652 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4653 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4654
4655 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4656 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4657 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4658 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4659 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4660
4661 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4662 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4663 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4664 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4665 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4666
4667 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4668 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4669 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4670
4671 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4672 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4673
4674 @smallexample
4675 @group
4676 PHDRS
4677 @{
4678 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4679 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4680 @}
4681 @end group
4682 @end smallexample
4683
4684 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4685 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4686 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4687 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4688 must have a distinct name.
4689
4690 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4691 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4692 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4693 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4694 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4695 Section Phdr}.
4696
4697 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4698 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4699 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4700 contain the section.
4701
4702 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4703 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4704 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4705 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4706 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4707 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4708 segment at all.
4709
4710 @kindex FILEHDR
4711 @kindex PHDRS
4712 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4713 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4714 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4715 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4716 include the ELF program headers themselves.
4717
4718 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4719 value of the keyword.
4720
4721 @table @asis
4722 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4723 Indicates an unused program header.
4724
4725 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4726 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4727 the file.
4728
4729 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4730 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4731
4732 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4733 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4734 found.
4735
4736 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4737 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4738
4739 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4740 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4741 ABI.
4742
4743 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4744 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4745
4746 @item @var{expression}
4747 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4748 be used for types not defined above.
4749 @end table
4750
4751 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4752 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4753 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4754 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4755 output section attribute.
4756
4757 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4758 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4759 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4760 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4761 header.
4762
4763 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4764 headers used on a native ELF system.
4765
4766 @example
4767 @group
4768 PHDRS
4769 @{
4770 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4771 interp PT_INTERP ;
4772 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4773 data PT_LOAD ;
4774 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4775 @}
4776
4777 SECTIONS
4778 @{
4779 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4780 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4781 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4782 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4783 @dots{}
4784 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4785 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4786 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4787 @dots{}
4788 @}
4789 @end group
4790 @end example
4791
4792 @node VERSION
4793 @section VERSION Command
4794 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4795 @cindex symbol versions
4796 @cindex version script
4797 @cindex versions of symbols
4798 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4799 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4800 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4801 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4802 shared library.
4803
4804 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4805 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4806 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4807
4808 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4809 @smallexample
4810 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4811 @end smallexample
4812
4813 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4814 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4815 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4816 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4817 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4818 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4819 library.
4820
4821 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4822 examples.
4823
4824 @smallexample
4825 VERS_1.1 @{
4826 global:
4827 foo1;
4828 local:
4829 old*;
4830 original*;
4831 new*;
4832 @};
4833
4834 VERS_1.2 @{
4835 foo2;
4836 @} VERS_1.1;
4837
4838 VERS_2.0 @{
4839 bar1; bar2;
4840 extern "C++" @{
4841 ns::*;
4842 "int f(int, double)";
4843 @}
4844 @} VERS_1.2;
4845 @end smallexample
4846
4847 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4848 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4849 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4850 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4851 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4852 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4853 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4854 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4855 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4856 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4857
4858 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4859 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4860 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4861
4862 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4863 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4864 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4865
4866 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4867 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4868 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
4869 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4870 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4871 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4872 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4873 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4874 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4875
4876 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4877 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4878 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4879 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4880
4881 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4882 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4883 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4884 won't.
4885
4886 @smallexample
4887 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
4888 @end smallexample
4889
4890 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4891 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4892 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4893 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4894 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4895 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4896 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4897 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4898 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4899 search for each symbol reference.
4900
4901 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4902 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4903 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4904 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4905 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4906 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4907 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4908 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4909 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4910
4911 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4912 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4913 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4914 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4915 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4916 @smallexample
4917 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4918 @end smallexample
4919 @noindent
4920 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4921 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4922 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
4923 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4924 takes precedence over a version script.
4925
4926 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4927 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4928 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4929 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4930 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4931
4932 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4933 source file. Here is an example:
4934
4935 @smallexample
4936 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4937 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4938 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4939 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4940 @end smallexample
4941
4942 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4943 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4944 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4945 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4946
4947 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4948 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4949 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4950 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4951 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4952 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4953
4954 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4955 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4956 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
4957 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4958
4959 You can also specify the language in the version script:
4960
4961 @smallexample
4962 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4963 @end smallexample
4964
4965 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
4966 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4967 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4968 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4969
4970 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4971 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4972 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4973 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4974 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4975 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4976 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4977 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4978 expect when you upgrade.
4979
4980 @node Expressions
4981 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4982 @cindex expressions
4983 @cindex arithmetic
4984 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4985 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4986 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4987 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4988
4989 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4990
4991 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4992 expressions.
4993
4994 @menu
4995 * Constants:: Constants
4996 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
4997 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
4998 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
4999 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5000 * Operators:: Operators
5001 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5002 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5003 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5004 @end menu
5005
5006 @node Constants
5007 @subsection Constants
5008 @cindex integer notation
5009 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5010 All constants are integers.
5011
5012 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5013 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5014 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5015 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5016 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5017 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5018
5019 @cindex scaled integers
5020 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5021 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5022 @cindex suffixes for integers
5023 @cindex integer suffixes
5024 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5025 constant by
5026 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5027 @ifnottex
5028 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5029 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5030 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5031 @end ifnottex
5032 @tex
5033 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5034 @end tex
5035 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5036 respectively. For example, the following
5037 all refer to the same quantity:
5038
5039 @smallexample
5040 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5041 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5042 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5043 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5044 @end smallexample
5045
5046 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5047 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5048
5049 @node Symbolic Constants
5050 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5051 @cindex symbolic constants
5052 @kindex CONSTANT
5053 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5054 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5055
5056 @table @code
5057 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5058 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5059 The target's maximum page size.
5060
5061 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5062 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5063 The target's default page size.
5064 @end table
5065
5066 So for example:
5067
5068 @smallexample
5069 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5070 @end smallexample
5071
5072 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5073 supported by the target.
5074
5075 @node Symbols
5076 @subsection Symbol Names
5077 @cindex symbol names
5078 @cindex names
5079 @cindex quoted symbol names
5080 @kindex "
5081 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5082 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5083 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5084 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5085 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5086 @smallexample
5087 "SECTION" = 9;
5088 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5089 @end smallexample
5090
5091 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5092 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5093 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5094
5095 @node Orphan Sections
5096 @subsection Orphan Sections
5097 @cindex orphan
5098 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5099 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5100 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5101 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5102 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5103 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5104 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5105 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5106 at the end of the file.
5107
5108 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5109 well as section flag.
5110
5111 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5112 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5113 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5114 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5115 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5116 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5117 character.
5118
5119 @node Location Counter
5120 @subsection The Location Counter
5121 @kindex .
5122 @cindex dot
5123 @cindex location counter
5124 @cindex current output location
5125 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5126 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5127 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5128 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5129 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5130
5131 @cindex holes
5132 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5133 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5134 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5135 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5136 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5137
5138 @smallexample
5139 SECTIONS
5140 @{
5141 output :
5142 @{
5143 file1(.text)
5144 . = . + 1000;
5145 file2(.text)
5146 . += 1000;
5147 file3(.text)
5148 @} = 0x12345678;
5149 @}
5150 @end smallexample
5151 @noindent
5152 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5153 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5154 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5155 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5156 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5157 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5158
5159 @cindex dot inside sections
5160 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5161 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5162 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5163 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5164 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5165 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5166
5167 @smallexample
5168 SECTIONS
5169 @{
5170 . = 0x100
5171 .text: @{
5172 *(.text)
5173 . = 0x200
5174 @}
5175 . = 0x500
5176 .data: @{
5177 *(.data)
5178 . += 0x600
5179 @}
5180 @}
5181 @end smallexample
5182
5183 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5184 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5185 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5186 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5187 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5188 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5189 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5190 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5191
5192 @cindex dot outside sections
5193 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5194 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5195 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5196
5197 @smallexample
5198 SECTIONS
5199 @{
5200 start_of_text = . ;
5201 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5202 end_of_text = . ;
5203
5204 start_of_data = . ;
5205 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5206 end_of_data = . ;
5207 @}
5208 @end smallexample
5209
5210 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5211 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5212 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5213 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5214 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5215 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5216 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5217 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5218 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5219 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5220 as follows:
5221
5222 @smallexample
5223 SECTIONS
5224 @{
5225 start_of_text = . ;
5226 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5227 end_of_text = . ;
5228
5229 start_of_data = . ;
5230 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5231 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5232 end_of_data = . ;
5233 @}
5234 @end smallexample
5235
5236 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5237 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5238 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5239 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5240 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5241 section. So you could write:
5242
5243 @smallexample
5244 SECTIONS
5245 @{
5246 start_of_text = . ;
5247 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5248 end_of_text = . ;
5249
5250 . = . ;
5251 start_of_data = . ;
5252 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5253 end_of_data = . ;
5254 @}
5255 @end smallexample
5256
5257 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5258 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5259
5260 @need 2000
5261 @node Operators
5262 @subsection Operators
5263 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5264 @cindex arithmetic operators
5265 @cindex precedence in expressions
5266 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5267 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5268 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5269 @ifnottex
5270 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5271 @smallexample
5272 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5273 (highest)
5274 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5275 2 left * / %
5276 3 left + -
5277 4 left >> <<
5278 5 left == != > < <= >=
5279 6 left &
5280 7 left |
5281 8 left &&
5282 9 left ||
5283 10 right ? :
5284 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5285 (lowest)
5286 @end smallexample
5287 Notes:
5288 (1) Prefix operators
5289 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5290 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5291 @end ifnottex
5292 @tex
5293 \vskip \baselineskip
5294 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5295 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5296 \hrule
5297 \halign
5298 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5299 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5300 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5301 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5302 \noalign{\hrule}
5303 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5304 &highest&&&&&\cr
5305 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5306 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5307 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5308 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5309 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5310 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5311 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5312 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5313 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5314 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5315 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5316 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5317 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5318 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5319 \hrule}
5320 @end tex
5321 @iftex
5322 {
5323 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5324 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5325 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5326 }
5327 @end iftex
5328 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5329
5330 @node Evaluation
5331 @subsection Evaluation
5332 @cindex lazy evaluation
5333 @cindex expression evaluation order
5334 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5335 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5336
5337 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5338 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5339 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5340 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5341
5342 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5343 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5344 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5345 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5346
5347 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5348 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5349 allocation.
5350
5351 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5352 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5353
5354 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5355 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5356 following
5357 @smallexample
5358 @group
5359 SECTIONS
5360 @{
5361 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5362 @{ *(.text) @}
5363 @}
5364 @end group
5365 @end smallexample
5366 @noindent
5367 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5368 address}.
5369
5370 @node Expression Section
5371 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5372 @cindex expression sections
5373 @cindex absolute expressions
5374 @cindex relative expressions
5375 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5376 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5377 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5378 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5379 or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5380 fixed offset from the base of a section.
5381
5382 The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5383 whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5384 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5385 section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5386
5387 A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5388 relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5389 further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5390 section will be the section of the relative expression.
5391
5392 A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5393 through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5394 will not have any particular associated section.
5395
5396 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5397 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5398 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5399 section @samp{.data}:
5400 @smallexample
5401 SECTIONS
5402 @{
5403 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5404 @}
5405 @end smallexample
5406 @noindent
5407 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5408 @samp{.data} section.
5409
5410 @node Builtin Functions
5411 @subsection Builtin Functions
5412 @cindex functions in expressions
5413 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5414 use in linker script expressions.
5415
5416 @table @code
5417 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5418 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5419 @cindex expression, absolute
5420 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5421 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5422 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5423 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5424
5425 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5426 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5427 @cindex section address in expression
5428 Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5429 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5430 the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5431 identical values:
5432 @smallexample
5433 @group
5434 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5435 .output1 :
5436 @{
5437 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5438 @dots{}
5439 @}
5440 .output :
5441 @{
5442 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5443 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5444 @}
5445 @dots{} @}
5446 @end group
5447 @end smallexample
5448
5449 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5450 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5451 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5452 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5453 @cindex round up location counter
5454 @cindex align location counter
5455 @cindex round up expression
5456 @cindex align expression
5457 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5458 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5459 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5460 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5461 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5462 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5463
5464 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5465 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5466 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5467 input sections:
5468 @smallexample
5469 @group
5470 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5471 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5472 *(.data)
5473 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5474 @}
5475 @dots{} @}
5476 @end group
5477 @end smallexample
5478 @noindent
5479 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5480 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5481 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5482 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5483
5484 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5485
5486 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5487 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5488 @cindex section alignment
5489 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5490 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5491 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5492 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5493 value in that section.
5494 @smallexample
5495 @group
5496 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5497 .output @{
5498 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5499 @dots{}
5500 @}
5501 @dots{} @}
5502 @end group
5503 @end smallexample
5504
5505 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5506 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5507 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5508 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5509 section.
5510
5511 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5512 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5513 This is equivalent to either
5514 @smallexample
5515 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5516 @end smallexample
5517 or
5518 @smallexample
5519 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5520 @end smallexample
5521 @noindent
5522 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5523 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5524 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5525 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5526 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5527 bytes in the on-disk file.
5528
5529 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5530 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5531 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5532 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5533 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5534
5535 @noindent
5536 Example:
5537 @smallexample
5538 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5539 @end smallexample
5540
5541 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5542 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5543 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5544 evaluation purposes.
5545
5546 @smallexample
5547 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5548 @end smallexample
5549
5550 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5551 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5552 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5553 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5554 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5555 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5556 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5557 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5558 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5559 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5560
5561 @smallexample
5562 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5563 @end smallexample
5564
5565 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5566 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5567 @cindex symbol defaults
5568 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5569 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5570 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5571 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5572 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5573 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5574 existed, its value is preserved:
5575
5576 @smallexample
5577 @group
5578 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5579 .text : @{
5580 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5581 @dots{}
5582 @}
5583 @dots{}
5584 @}
5585 @end group
5586 @end smallexample
5587
5588 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5589 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5590 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5591
5592 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5593 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5594 @cindex section load address in expression
5595 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5596 the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5597 attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5598 Section LMA}).
5599
5600 @kindex MAX
5601 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5602 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5603
5604 @kindex MIN
5605 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5606 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5607
5608 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5609 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5610 @cindex unallocated address, next
5611 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5612 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5613 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5614 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5615
5616 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5617 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5618 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5619
5620 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5621 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5622 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5623 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5624 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5625 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5626 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5627 ``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5628 name.
5629
5630 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5631 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5632 @cindex section size
5633 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5634 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5635 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5636 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5637 @smallexample
5638 @group
5639 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5640 .output @{
5641 .start = . ;
5642 @dots{}
5643 .end = . ;
5644 @}
5645 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5646 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5647 @dots{} @}
5648 @end group
5649 @end smallexample
5650
5651 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5652 @itemx sizeof_headers
5653 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5654 @cindex header size
5655 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5656 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5657 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5658 choose, to facilitate paging.
5659
5660 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5661 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5662 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5663 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5664 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5665 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5666 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5667 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5668 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5669 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5670 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5671 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5672 @end table
5673
5674 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5675 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5676 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5677 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5678 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5679 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5680 linker will report an error.
5681
5682 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5683
5684 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5685 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5686 commands.
5687
5688 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5689 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5690 read. This can affect archive searching.
5691
5692 @ifset GENERIC
5693 @node Machine Dependent
5694 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5695
5696 @cindex machine dependencies
5697 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5698 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5699 functionality are not listed.
5700
5701 @menu
5702 @ifset H8300
5703 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5704 @end ifset
5705 @ifset I960
5706 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5707 @end ifset
5708 @ifset ARM
5709 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5710 @end ifset
5711 @ifset HPPA
5712 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5713 @end ifset
5714 @ifset M68K
5715 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5716 @end ifset
5717 @ifset MMIX
5718 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5719 @end ifset
5720 @ifset MSP430
5721 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5722 @end ifset
5723 @ifset M68HC11
5724 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5725 @end ifset
5726 @ifset POWERPC
5727 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5728 @end ifset
5729 @ifset POWERPC64
5730 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5731 @end ifset
5732 @ifset SPU
5733 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5734 @end ifset
5735 @ifset TICOFF
5736 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5737 @end ifset
5738 @ifset WIN32
5739 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5740 @end ifset
5741 @ifset XTENSA
5742 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5743 @end ifset
5744 @end menu
5745 @end ifset
5746
5747 @ifset H8300
5748 @ifclear GENERIC
5749 @raisesections
5750 @end ifclear
5751
5752 @node H8/300
5753 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5754
5755 @cindex H8/300 support
5756 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5757 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5758
5759 @table @emph
5760 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5761 @item relaxing address modes
5762 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5763 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5764 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5765 respectively.
5766
5767 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5768 @item synthesizing instructions
5769 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5770 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5771 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5772 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5773 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5774 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5775 top page of memory).
5776
5777 @item bit manipulation instructions
5778 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5779 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5780 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5781 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5782 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5783 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5784 the top page of memory).
5785
5786 @item system control instructions
5787 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
5788 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5789 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5790 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5791 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5792 the top page of memory).
5793 @end table
5794
5795 @ifclear GENERIC
5796 @lowersections
5797 @end ifclear
5798 @end ifset
5799
5800 @ifclear GENERIC
5801 @ifset Renesas
5802 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5803 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5804 @node Renesas
5805 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5806
5807 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5808 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5809 options are required for these chips.
5810 @end ifset
5811 @end ifclear
5812
5813 @ifset I960
5814 @ifclear GENERIC
5815 @raisesections
5816 @end ifclear
5817
5818 @node i960
5819 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5820
5821 @cindex i960 support
5822
5823 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5824 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5825 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5826 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5827 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5828 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5829 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5830
5831 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5832 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5833 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5834 the names
5835
5836 @smallexample
5837 @group
5838 try
5839 libtry.a
5840 tryca
5841 libtryca.a
5842 @end group
5843 @end smallexample
5844
5845 @noindent
5846 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5847 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5848
5849 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5850 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5851 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5852 specifies a library.
5853
5854 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5855 @cindex relaxing on i960
5856 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5857 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5858 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5859 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5860 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5861 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5862 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5863 not itself call any subroutines).
5864
5865 @ifclear GENERIC
5866 @lowersections
5867 @end ifclear
5868 @end ifset
5869
5870 @ifset ARM
5871 @ifclear GENERIC
5872 @raisesections
5873 @end ifclear
5874
5875 @ifset M68HC11
5876 @ifclear GENERIC
5877 @raisesections
5878 @end ifclear
5879
5880 @node M68HC11/68HC12
5881 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5882
5883 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5884
5885 @subsection Linker Relaxation
5886
5887 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5888 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5889
5890 @table @emph
5891 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5892 @item relaxing address modes
5893 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5894 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5895 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5896 respectively.
5897
5898 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5899 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5900 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5901
5902 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
5903 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5904 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5905 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5906 @code{bset} instructions.
5907
5908 @end table
5909
5910 @subsection Trampoline Generation
5911
5912 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5913 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5914 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5915 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
5916 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
5917 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5918 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5919 point to the function trampoline.
5920
5921 @ifclear GENERIC
5922 @lowersections
5923 @end ifclear
5924 @end ifset
5925
5926 @node ARM
5927 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
5928
5929 @cindex ARM interworking support
5930 @kindex --support-old-code
5931 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5932 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
5933 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5934 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5935 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5936 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5937 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5938 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5939 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5940 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5941
5942 @cindex thumb entry point
5943 @cindex entry point, thumb
5944 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5945 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5946 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5947 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5948 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5949 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5950
5951 @cindex PE import table prefixing
5952 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5953 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5954 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5955 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5956 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5957
5958 @cindex BE8
5959 @kindex --be8
5960 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5961 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5962 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5963
5964 @cindex TARGET1
5965 @kindex --target1-rel
5966 @kindex --target1-abs
5967 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5968 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5969 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5970 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5971
5972 @cindex TARGET2
5973 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
5974 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5975 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5976 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5977 @table @samp
5978 @item rel
5979 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5980 @item abs
5981 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
5982 @item got-rel
5983 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5984 @end table
5985
5986 @cindex FIX_V4BX
5987 @kindex --fix-v4bx
5988 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5989 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5990 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5991 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5992
5993 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5994 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5995 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5996
5997 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5998 relocations are ignored.
5999
6000 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6001 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6002 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6003 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6004
6005 @smallexample
6006 TST rM, #1
6007 MOVEQ PC, rM
6008 BX Rn
6009 @end smallexample
6010
6011 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6012 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6013 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6014
6015 @cindex USE_BLX
6016 @kindex --use-blx
6017 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6018 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6019 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6020 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6021 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6022
6023 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6024 specify it if you are using that target.
6025
6026 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6027 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6028 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6029 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6030 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6031 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6032 the support code can read the intended values.
6033
6034 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6035 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6036 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6037 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6038 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6039 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6040
6041 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6042 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6043 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6044 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6045 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6046 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6047
6048 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6049 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6050 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6051 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6052 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6053 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6054 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6055
6056 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6057 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6058 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6059 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6060 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6061 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6062 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6063 not be diagnosed.
6064
6065 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6066 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6067 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6068 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6069 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6070 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6071 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6072
6073 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6074 @kindex --pic-veneer
6075 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6076 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6077 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6078 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6079
6080 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6081 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6082 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6083 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6084 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6085 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6086 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6087 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6088 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6089 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6090 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6091 where they should be placed.
6092
6093 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6094 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6095 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6096 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6097 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6098 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6099 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6100 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6101 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6102 from the input sections.
6103
6104 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6105 @samp{N = +1}.
6106
6107 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6108 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6109 otherwise.
6110
6111 @ifclear GENERIC
6112 @lowersections
6113 @end ifclear
6114 @end ifset
6115
6116 @ifset HPPA
6117 @ifclear GENERIC
6118 @raisesections
6119 @end ifclear
6120
6121 @node HPPA ELF32
6122 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6123 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6124 @kindex --multi-subspace
6125 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6126 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6127 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6128 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6129 multiple sub-spaces.
6130
6131 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6132 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6133 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6134 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6135 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6136 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6137 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6138 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6139 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6140 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6141 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6142 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6143 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6144 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6145 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6146 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6147
6148 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6149 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6150 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6151 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6152
6153 @ifclear GENERIC
6154 @lowersections
6155 @end ifclear
6156 @end ifset
6157
6158 @ifset M68K
6159 @ifclear GENERIC
6160 @raisesections
6161 @end ifclear
6162
6163 @node M68K
6164 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6165
6166 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6167 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6168 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6169 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6170 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6171 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6172 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6173 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6174 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6175 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6176 support such GOTs.
6177 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6178 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6179 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6180 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6181
6182 @ifclear GENERIC
6183 @lowersections
6184 @end ifclear
6185 @end ifset
6186
6187 @ifset MMIX
6188 @ifclear GENERIC
6189 @raisesections
6190 @end ifclear
6191
6192 @node MMIX
6193 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6194 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6195 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6196 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6197 can translate between the two formats.
6198
6199 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6200 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6201 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6202 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6203 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6204 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6205 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6206 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6207
6208 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6209 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6210 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6211 of a section.
6212
6213 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6214 are left out from an mmo file.
6215
6216 @ifclear GENERIC
6217 @lowersections
6218 @end ifclear
6219 @end ifset
6220
6221 @ifset MSP430
6222 @ifclear GENERIC
6223 @raisesections
6224 @end ifclear
6225
6226 @node MSP430
6227 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6228 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6229 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6230 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6231
6232 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6233 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6234
6235 @table @code
6236 @item @samp{.vectors}
6237 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6238
6239 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6240 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6241 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6242
6243 @item @samp{.infomem}
6244 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6245 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6246
6247 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6248 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6249 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6250
6251 @item @samp{.noinit}
6252 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6253
6254 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6255 @end table
6256
6257 @ifclear GENERIC
6258 @lowersections
6259 @end ifclear
6260 @end ifset
6261
6262 @ifset POWERPC
6263 @ifclear GENERIC
6264 @raisesections
6265 @end ifclear
6266
6267 @node PowerPC ELF32
6268 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6269 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6270 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6271 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6272 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6273 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6274 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6275 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6276 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6277 section exceeds 33M in size.
6278
6279 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6280 @table @option
6281 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6282 @kindex --bss-plt
6283 @item --bss-plt
6284 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6285 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6286 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6287 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6288 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6289 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6290 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6291 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6292
6293 @kindex --secure-plt
6294 @item --secure-plt
6295 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6296 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6297 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6298 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6299 style BSS PLT.
6300
6301 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6302 @kindex --sdata-got
6303 @item --sdata-got
6304 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6305 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6306 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6307 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6308 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6309 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6310 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6311 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6312 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6313 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6314 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6315 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6316
6317 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6318 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6319 @item --emit-stub-syms
6320 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6321 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6322
6323 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6324 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6325 @item --no-tls-optimize
6326 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6327 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6328 disable the optimization.
6329 @end table
6330
6331 @ifclear GENERIC
6332 @lowersections
6333 @end ifclear
6334 @end ifset
6335
6336 @ifset POWERPC64
6337 @ifclear GENERIC
6338 @raisesections
6339 @end ifclear
6340
6341 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6342 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6343
6344 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6345 @table @option
6346 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6347 @kindex --stub-group-size
6348 @item --stub-group-size
6349 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6350 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6351 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6352 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6353 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6354 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6355 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6356 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6357 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6358 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6359 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6360 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6361 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6362 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6363
6364 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6365 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6366 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6367 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6368
6369 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6370 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6371 @item --emit-stub-syms
6372 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6373 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6374
6375 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6376 @kindex --dotsyms
6377 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6378 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6379 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6380 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6381 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6382 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6383 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6384 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6385 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6386 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6387 feature.
6388
6389 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6390 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6391 @item --no-tls-optimize
6392 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6393 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6394 disable the optimization.
6395
6396 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6397 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6398 @item --no-opd-optimize
6399 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6400 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6401 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6402 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6403
6404 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6405 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6406 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6407 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6408 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6409 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6410 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6411
6412 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6413 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6414 @item --no-toc-optimize
6415 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6416 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6417 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6418 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6419 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6420 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6421 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6422 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6423 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6424 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6425 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6426 optimization.
6427
6428 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6429 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6430 @item --no-multi-toc
6431 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6432 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6433 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6434 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6435 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6436 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6437 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6438 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6439 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6440 @end table
6441
6442 @ifclear GENERIC
6443 @lowersections
6444 @end ifclear
6445 @end ifset
6446
6447 @ifset SPU
6448 @ifclear GENERIC
6449 @raisesections
6450 @end ifclear
6451
6452 @node SPU ELF
6453 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6454
6455 @cindex SPU ELF options
6456 @table @option
6457
6458 @cindex SPU plugins
6459 @kindex --plugin
6460 @item --plugin
6461 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6462
6463 @cindex SPU overlays
6464 @kindex --no-overlays
6465 @item --no-overlays
6466 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6467 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6468 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6469 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6470
6471 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6472 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6473 @item --emit-stub-syms
6474 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6475 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6476
6477 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6478 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6479 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6480 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6481 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6482 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6483
6484 @cindex SPU local store size
6485 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6486 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6487 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6488 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6489 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6490
6491 @cindex SPU
6492 @kindex --stack-analysis
6493 @item --stack-analysis
6494 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6495 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6496 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6497 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6498 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6499 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6500 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6501 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6502 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6503 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6504 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6505 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6506 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6507 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6508 and calls will be given.
6509
6510 @cindex SPU
6511 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6512 @item --emit-stack-syms
6513 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6514 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6515 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6516 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6517 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6518 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6519 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6520 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6521 @end table
6522
6523 @ifclear GENERIC
6524 @lowersections
6525 @end ifclear
6526 @end ifset
6527
6528 @ifset TICOFF
6529 @ifclear GENERIC
6530 @raisesections
6531 @end ifclear
6532
6533 @node TI COFF
6534 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6535 @cindex TI COFF versions
6536 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6537 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6538 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6539 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6540 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6541 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6542
6543 @ifclear GENERIC
6544 @lowersections
6545 @end ifclear
6546 @end ifset
6547
6548 @ifset WIN32
6549 @ifclear GENERIC
6550 @raisesections
6551 @end ifclear
6552
6553 @node WIN32
6554 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6555
6556 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6557 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6558 command line options mentioned here.
6559
6560 @table @emph
6561 @cindex import libraries
6562 @item import libraries
6563 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6564 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6565 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6566 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6567 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6568 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6569
6570 @item exporting DLL symbols
6571 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6572 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6573
6574 @table @emph
6575 @item using auto-export functionality
6576 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6577 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6578 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6579
6580 @itemize
6581 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6582 @item --exclude-symbols
6583 @item --exclude-libs
6584 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6585 @end itemize
6586
6587 If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6588 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6589 if either of the following are true:
6590
6591 @itemize
6592 @item A DEF file is used.
6593 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6594 @end itemize
6595
6596 @item using a DEF file
6597 @cindex using a DEF file
6598 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6599 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6600 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6601 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6602 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6603
6604 @example
6605 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6606 @end example
6607
6608 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6609 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6610
6611 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6612
6613 @example
6614 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6615
6616 EXPORTS
6617 foo
6618 bar
6619 _bar = bar
6620 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6621 var1 DATA
6622 @end example
6623
6624 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6625 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6626 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6627 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6628 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6629 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6630
6631 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6632 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6633 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6634
6635 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6636 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6637 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6638 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6639
6640 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6641 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6642 non-default base address for the image.
6643
6644 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6645 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6646 filename specified on the command line.
6647
6648 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6649
6650 @example
6651 EXPORTS
6652 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6653 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6654 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
6655 @end example
6656
6657 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6658 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6659 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6660 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6661 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6662 @samp{<integer>} alias.
6663
6664 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6665
6666 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6667 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6668 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6669 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6670 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6671
6672 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6673 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6674 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6675 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6676
6677 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6678 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6679 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6680 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6681 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6682 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6683 application will behave unexpectedly.
6684
6685 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6686 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6687 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6688 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6689 the DLL without an import library.
6690
6691 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6692 other DEF file statements
6693
6694 @cindex creating a DEF file
6695 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6696 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6697
6698 @item Using decorations
6699 @cindex Using decorations
6700 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6701 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6702 declared as:
6703
6704 @example
6705 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6706 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6707 @end example
6708
6709 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6710 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6711 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6712 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6713
6714 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6715 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6716 instead:
6717
6718 @example
6719 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6720 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6721 @end example
6722
6723 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6724 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6725 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6726 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6727 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6728 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6729 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6730 information.
6731 @end table
6732
6733 @cindex automatic data imports
6734 @item automatic data imports
6735 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6736 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6737 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6738 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6739 code to these platforms, especially for large
6740 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6741 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6742 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6743 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6744 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6745 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6746 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6747 trigger the feature's use.
6748
6749 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6750 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6751
6752 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6753 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6754
6755 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6756 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6757 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6758 below.
6759
6760 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6761 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6762 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6763 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6764 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6765 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6766 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6767 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6768 references.
6769
6770 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6771 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6772 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6773 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6774 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6775 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6776 run without error on an older system.
6777
6778 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6779 enabled as needed.
6780
6781 @cindex direct linking to a dll
6782 @item direct linking to a dll
6783 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6784 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6785 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
6786 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
6787 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6788 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6789 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
6790 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
6791 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
6792 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6793
6794 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
6795 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
6796 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
6797 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6798 select the dll instead of an import library.
6799
6800
6801 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6802 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
6803
6804 @example
6805 libxxx.dll.a
6806 xxx.dll.a
6807 libxxx.a
6808 xxx.lib
6809 cygxxx.dll (*)
6810 libxxx.dll
6811 xxx.dll
6812 @end example
6813
6814 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6815
6816 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6817 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6818 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6819 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
6820 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6821
6822 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6823 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
6824 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6825 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6826 could coexist on the same machine.
6827
6828 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6829 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
6830 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
6831
6832 @example
6833 bin/
6834 cygxxx.dll
6835 lib/
6836 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
6837 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
6838 @end example
6839
6840 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6841 done two ways:
6842
6843 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6844 @example
6845 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
6846 @end example
6847
6848 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6849 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6850 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6851 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6852
6853 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6854 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6855 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6856 making the app/dll.
6857
6858 @example
6859 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
6860 @end example
6861
6862 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6863
6864 @example
6865 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
6866 @end example
6867
6868 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6869 perfectly legal
6870
6871 @example
6872 bin/
6873 cygxxx-5.dll
6874 lib/
6875 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
6876 @end example
6877
6878 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
6879 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6880 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6881
6882 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
6883 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
6884
6885 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6886 work with auto-imported data.
6887
6888 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6889 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6890 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6891 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6892 possible to do this without an import lib.
6893
6894 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6895 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6896 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6897 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6898
6899 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
6900 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6901 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6902 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
6903 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6904 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6905 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6906
6907 @item symbol aliasing
6908 @table @emph
6909 @item adding additional names
6910 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
6911 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6912 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6913 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
6914 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
6915
6916 @example
6917 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6918
6919 EXPORTS
6920 foo
6921 _foo = foo
6922 @end example
6923
6924 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6925
6926 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6927 source code using the "weak" attribute:
6928
6929 @example
6930 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
6931 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6932 @end example
6933
6934 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6935 symbols.
6936
6937 @item renaming symbols
6938 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
6939 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
6940 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6941 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
6942 created). In the following example:
6943
6944 @example
6945 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6946
6947 EXPORTS
6948 _foo = foo
6949 @end example
6950
6951 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6952 @samp{_foo}.
6953 @end table
6954
6955 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
6956 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
6957 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
6958 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6959 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6960 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6961 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6962 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6963 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6964 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
6965 which is probably not what you wanted.
6966
6967 @cindex weak externals
6968 @item weak externals
6969 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6970 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6971 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6972 are three variants of weak externals:
6973 @itemize
6974 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6975 called lazy externals.
6976 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6977 This form is not presently implemented.
6978 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6979 implemented.
6980 @end itemize
6981 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6982 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6983 uses a default value.
6984 @end table
6985
6986 @ifclear GENERIC
6987 @lowersections
6988 @end ifclear
6989 @end ifset
6990
6991 @ifset XTENSA
6992 @ifclear GENERIC
6993 @raisesections
6994 @end ifclear
6995
6996 @node Xtensa
6997 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6998
6999 @cindex Xtensa processors
7000 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7001 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7002 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7003 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7004 example, with the command:
7005
7006 @smallexample
7007 SECTIONS
7008 @{
7009 .text : @{
7010 *(.literal .text)
7011 @}
7012 @}
7013 @end smallexample
7014
7015 @noindent
7016 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7017 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7018 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7019 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7020 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7021 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7022 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7023
7024 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7025 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7026 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7027 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7028 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7029 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7030 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7031 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7032 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7033 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7034 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7035 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7036
7037 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7038 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7039 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7040 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7041 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7042 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7043 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7044 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7045 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7046 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7047 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7048 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7049 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7050 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7051
7052 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7053 control the linker:
7054
7055 @cindex Xtensa options
7056 @table @option
7057 @kindex --no-relax
7058 @item --no-relax
7059 Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7060 by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7061 relaxation.
7062
7063 @item --size-opt
7064 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7065 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7066 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7067 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7068 preserve the correctness of the code.
7069 @end table
7070
7071 @ifclear GENERIC
7072 @lowersections
7073 @end ifclear
7074 @end ifset
7075
7076 @ifclear SingleFormat
7077 @node BFD
7078 @chapter BFD
7079
7080 @cindex back end
7081 @cindex object file management
7082 @cindex object formats available
7083 @kindex objdump -i
7084 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7085 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7086 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7087 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7088 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7089 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7090 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7091 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7092 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7093
7094 @cindex BFD requirements
7095 @cindex requirements for BFD
7096 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7097 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7098 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7099 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7100 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7101 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7102 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7103
7104 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7105 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7106 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7107 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7108
7109 @menu
7110 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7111 @end menu
7112
7113 @node BFD outline
7114 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7115 @cindex opening object files
7116 @include bfdsumm.texi
7117 @end ifclear
7118
7119 @node Reporting Bugs
7120 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7121 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7122 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7123
7124 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7125
7126 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7127 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7128 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7129 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7130 @command{ld}.
7131
7132 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7133 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7134
7135 @menu
7136 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7137 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7138 @end menu
7139
7140 @node Bug Criteria
7141 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7142 @cindex bug criteria
7143
7144 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7145
7146 @itemize @bullet
7147 @cindex fatal signal
7148 @cindex linker crash
7149 @cindex crash of linker
7150 @item
7151 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7152 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7153
7154 @cindex error on valid input
7155 @item
7156 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7157
7158 @cindex invalid input
7159 @item
7160 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7161 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7162 object files are correct.
7163
7164 @item
7165 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7166 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7167 @end itemize
7168
7169 @node Bug Reporting
7170 @section How to Report Bugs
7171 @cindex bug reports
7172 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7173
7174 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7175 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7176 recommend you contact that organization first.
7177
7178 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7179 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7180 distribution.
7181
7182 @ifset BUGURL
7183 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7184 @value{BUGURL}.
7185 @end ifset
7186
7187 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7188 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7189 fact or leave it out, state it!
7190
7191 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7192 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7193 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7194 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7195 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7196 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7197 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7198 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7199 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7200 and the most helpful.
7201
7202 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7203 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7204 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7205
7206 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7207 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7208 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7209 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7210
7211 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7212
7213 @itemize @bullet
7214 @item
7215 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7216 the @samp{--version} argument.
7217
7218 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7219 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7220
7221 @item
7222 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7223 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7224
7225 @item
7226 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7227 version number.
7228
7229 @item
7230 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7231 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7232
7233 @item
7234 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7235 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7236 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7237 sufficient.
7238
7239 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7240 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7241
7242 @item
7243 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7244 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7245 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7246 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7247 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7248 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7249 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7250 attachments are best.
7251
7252 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7253 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7254 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7255 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7256 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7257
7258 @item
7259 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7260 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7261
7262 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7263 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7264 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7265 a chance to make a mistake.
7266
7267 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7268 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7269 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7270 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7271 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7272 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7273 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7274 any conclusion from our observations.
7275
7276 @item
7277 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7278 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7279 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7280 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7281 context, not by line number.
7282
7283 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7284 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7285 @end itemize
7286
7287 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7288
7289 @itemize @bullet
7290 @item
7291 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7292
7293 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7294 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7295 changes will not affect it.
7296
7297 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7298 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7299 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7300 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7301
7302 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7303 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7304 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7305 less time, and so on.
7306
7307 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7308 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7309
7310 @item
7311 A patch for the bug.
7312
7313 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7314 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7315 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7316 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7317
7318 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7319 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7320 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7321 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7322 fixed.
7323
7324 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7325 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7326 help us to understand.
7327
7328 @item
7329 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7330
7331 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7332 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7333 @end itemize
7334
7335 @node MRI
7336 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7337 @cindex MRI compatibility
7338 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7339 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7340 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7341 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7342 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7343 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7344 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7345
7346 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7347 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7348 features to make use of them.
7349
7350 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7351 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7352
7353 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7354 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7355 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7356 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7357 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7358
7359 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7360
7361 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7362 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7363 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7364
7365 @table @code
7366 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7367 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7368 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7369 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7370 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7371 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7372 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7373 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7374 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7375 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7376 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7377
7378 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7379 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7380 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7381 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7382
7383 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7384
7385 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7386 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7387 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7388 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7389
7390 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7391 @item BASE @var{expression}
7392 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7393 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7394
7395 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7396 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7397 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7398 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7399
7400 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7401 @item END
7402 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7403
7404 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7405 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7406 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7407 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7408
7409 @enumerate
7410 @item
7411 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7412
7413 @item
7414 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7415
7416 @item
7417 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7418 @samp{COFF}
7419 @end enumerate
7420
7421 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7422 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7423 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7424 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7425
7426 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7427 same line, with no change in its effect.
7428
7429 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7430 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7431 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7432 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7433 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7434 command line.
7435
7436 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7437 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7438 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7439 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7440 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7441
7442 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7443 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7444 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7445 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7446 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7447 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7448 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7449 file, in the order specified.
7450
7451 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7452 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7453 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7454 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7455 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7456 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7457
7458 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7459 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7460 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7461 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7462 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7463 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7464 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7465 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7466 @end table
7467
7468 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7469 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7470 @include fdl.texi
7471
7472 @node LD Index
7473 @unnumbered LD Index
7474
7475 @printindex cp
7476
7477 @tex
7478 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7479 % meantime:
7480 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7481 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7482 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7483 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7484 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7485 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7486 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7487 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7488 \page\colophon
7489 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7490 @end tex
7491
7492 @bye
This page took 0.186299 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.